Buick Le Sabre 2004 Owner's Manual

2004 Buick LeSabre Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-6
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-27
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-47
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-56
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-21
Mirrors .................................................... 2-33
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-37
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-38
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-42
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-43
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-44
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-24
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-32
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-45
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-55
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-31
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-57
Tires
...................................................... 5-58
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-83
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-91
Electrical System ...................................... 5-91
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-99
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
.... 5-100
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, the
BUICK Emblem and the name LESABRE are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25755773 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/02/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
{CAUTION:
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11
Driver Position ..............................................1-12
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-19
Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-19
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-24
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26
Child Restraints .............................................1-27
Older Children ..............................................1-27
Infants and Young Children ............................1-29
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-36
Top Strap ....................................................1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-38
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-44
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-47
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-50
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-51
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-53
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-53
What Will You See After an Air
Bag Inflates? ............................................1-54
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-56
Restraint System Check ..................................1-56
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-57
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Pull up on the control bar located under the front of the
seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
If your vehicle has this feature, the controls for the power
seats are located on the outboard side of each front seat.
To adjust the power seats, do the following:
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat
cushion by pressing the forward edge of the control
up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by pressing
the rear edge of the control up or down.
Move the seat forward or rearward by pressing the
control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Move the seat higher or lower by holding the whole
control up or down.
1-2
Vertical Control (Option): Adjust the angle of the
seatback by pressing the top of the control forward or
rearward.
Manual Lumbar
If you have the independent front cushion moved down
as far as it will go, you may feel the lumbar support
higher in your back. Readjust the location of the cushion
until you are comfortable. You may also want to
adjust the seatback for maximum comfort.
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power lumbar
control is located on
the outboard side of each
front seat. Use the
power seat control first to
get the proper position.
Then continue with
the lumbar adjustment.
The knob that controls this feature is located on the
outboard side of each front seat. Turn the knob toward
the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support.
Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease
lumbar support.
To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar
control forward to increase support and rearward to
decrease support. Press the control up or down to raise
or lower the support mechanism.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
If you have the independent front cushion moved down
as far as it will go, you may feel the lumbar support
higher in your back. Readjust the location of the cushion
until you are comfortable. You may also want to
adjust the seatback for maximum comfort.
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, press this button to turn
on the heating element in the seat.
The heated seat buttons
are located on the driver’s
and front passenger’s
door panel.
When the heated seat button is first pressed, the high
setting is activated. Press the button again for the
low setting. The third press of the button turns the
feature off.
1-4
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until
the seat nears body temperature. The high setting heats
the seat to a slightly higher temperature.
The heated seats can be used only while the ignition is
turned on. When the ignition is turned off, the heating
element is also turned off.
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has power
seats, the vertical control
described previously in this
section reclines the front
seatbacks.
If your vehicle has the manual recliner, lift the lever on
the outboard side of the seat and move the seatback to
the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-36.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-7
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-9
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the
use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get
the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-11
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-12
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-13
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-14
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
1-16
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-17
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-18
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Center Front Passenger Position
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way,
you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If
this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit
in the center position.
If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be sure
to use the correct buckle when buckling your
lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not
go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the
buckle for the center passenger position.
1-19
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-20
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s
how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-21
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-22
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-23
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides
may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to
install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-24
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-25
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-21.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-26
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-27
Q:
A:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-29
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-30
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults and
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in
which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
1-31
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-32
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-33
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-34
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-35
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-36
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-37
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-38. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
{CAUTION:
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position because there is no place
to anchor the top strap.
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the
trim cover.
1-38
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) for all three rear seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-39
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a label on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located
near the base of all three
rear seating positions.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-40
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-37. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
CAUTION:
1-42
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
(Continued)
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap on
page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-44
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats on page 1-2 or Manual Seats
on page 1-2.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-45
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-46
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has a frontal air bag for the driver and a
frontal air bag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have a side impact air bag for the driver,
and another side impact air bag for the right front
passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driver
and/or right front passenger, the words AIR BAG
will appear on the air bag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-47
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for air bag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with frontal air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Front occupants should
not lean on or sleep against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-36.
1-49
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-50
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air
bag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
1-51
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph (18 to
26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is
about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-52
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-47. Side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-53
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side
of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-54
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records
speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-55
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-56
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part about the air bag system
earlier in this manual.
1-57
✍ NOTES
1-58
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Central Door Unlocking System ......................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Door Ajar Reminder ......................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-13
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-13
Trunk ..........................................................2-14
Windows ........................................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-17
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18
PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-31
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-32
Mirrors ...........................................................2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass .................................................2-33
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-35
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Outside Automatic Dimming
Heated Mirror ...........................................2-36
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-37
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-38
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-42
Glove Box ...................................................2-42
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-42
Convenience Net ..........................................2-42
2-2
Sunroof .........................................................2-43
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-44
Memory Seat and Mirrors ..............................2-44
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
2-3
There is a master key that
works in all of the lock
cylinders (driver’s
door, trunk, ignition, and
glove box).
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft
system. Both the master and VALET key have a
transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in
the vehicle’s steering column. If a replacement key
or any additional key is needed, you must purchase this
key from your dealer. The key will have PK3 stamped
on it. Keep the bar code tag that came with the original
keys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new
key made.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key® III on
page 2-19 for more information on programming
your new key.
There is also a VALET key
which operates only the
driver’s door and the
ignition.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® System
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command
to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on
page 2-37 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors
or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
2-5
If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, the numbers on
the back of your transmitter correspond to DRIVER #1
and DRIVER #2 on the DIC. For more information
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
W (Unlock): Press this
button to unlock the
driver’s door. Press it again
within five seconds to
unlock all of the doors. See
“Security Feedback”
later in this section.
Q (Lock):
Press this button to lock all doors.
V (Trunk): Press this button to unlock the trunk
when the ignition is in OFF. It will also work when the
ignition is on, but only while the transaxle is in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N).
L (Instant Alarm): Press this button to make the
horn sound and the headlamps and taillamps flash for
up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the
instant alarm button again or by turning the ignition
on. If your vehicle is equipped with the content
theft-deterrent feature, you may also turn off the instant
alarm by unlocking the vehicle with a key.
Personalization Features
The following features, if available on your vehicle, can
be programmed to each driver’s preference.
Pressing the unlock button may also illuminate the
interior lamps. See “Entry Lighting” under Interior Lamps
on page 3-17.
• Automatic Door Locks: This feature programs
your door locks to automatically lock or unlock
when shifting in and out of PARK (P).
• Security Feedback: This feature provides feedback
to the driver when the vehicle receives a command
from the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-6
• Delayed Locking: This feature allows for a five
second delay in locking the doors after the
closing of the last door.
• Perimeter Lighting: This feature provides for the
daytime running lamps (DRL), parking lamps and
the back-up lamps to turn on when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed.
For more detailed information and programming
instructions, refer to DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50 for each individual feature listed above.
Security Feedback
This feature provides feedback when the vehicle
receives a command from the remote keyless entry
transmitter. Feedback is only provided if all doors are
closed, the ignition is off and the Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is inactive. One of the following modes
may be selected for each transmitter:
Mode 3: Horn chirps when all doors are unlocked
(second time the button is pressed) and when locking
the vehicle.
Mode 4: Parking lamps, back-up lamps and the DRL
exterior lamps will flash twice each time the unlock
button is pressed; the horn chirps when all doors are
unlocked. Parking lamps and the DRL exterior
lamps flash once and the horn chirps when locking the
vehicle.
The exterior lamps will not flash if the manual parking
lamps are on.
If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, you must
program this feature using it. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC, do the
following to change to another mode:
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep
all doors closed throughout this procedure.
Mode 1: No feedback when locking or unlocking
vehicle.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door
lock switch throughout this procedure. All the
doors will lock.
Mode 2: Parking lamps, back-up lamps and the DRL
exterior lamps will flash twice when unlocking the vehicle
and flash once when locking the vehicle.
3. Press the trunk button on the transmitter. The
security feedback will remain in its current mode.
The horn will chirp as feedback.
2-7
4. Press the trunk button again. Each time the trunk
button is pressed, the security feedback will
advance to the next mode, and the horn will chirp.
5. Release the power door lock switch. The security
feedback will remain in the most current mode
selected.
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
This procedure only changes the mode for the
transmitter used to change this setting.
See your dealer to have additional transmitters matched
to your vehicle.
To verify the mode selected, remove the key from the
ignition and close all of the doors after you’ve exited the
vehicle. Press the lock button on the transmitter to be
verified and confirm the appropriate feedback.
Repeat with the unlock button.
Battery Replacement
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
2-8
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
To replace the battery, do the following:
1. Insert a coin, or similar object, into the notch near
the key ring. Turn it counterclockwise to separate
the two halves of the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
eraser to remove the old battery. Do not use a
metal object.
3. Remove and replace the battery as the instructions
inside the cover indicate. Use one Duracell®
battery, type DL–2032, or a similar type.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-9
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent system,
unlock the doors only with the key or remote keyless
entry system. This will avoid setting off the alarm.
To unlock the door from the outside, use your door key
or remote keyless entry transmitter. Turning the door
key toward the front of the vehicle will lock the
door. Turning the door key toward the rear of the
vehicle will unlock it.
Central Door Unlocking System
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system, all doors
will unlock if the key is held in the outside key cylinder
unlock position for more than two seconds. The
doors will also unlock if the key is turned to the unlock
position twice in three seconds.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, you can lock or unlock all the
doors on your vehicle.
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door panels.
To unlock the door from the inside, move the manual
door lock, located above the door handle, rearward. To
lock the door, move the manual door lock forward.
2-10
Door Ajar Reminder
Personal Choice Programming
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), and a door is not fully closed, the DIC will
display a DOOR AJAR message. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off.
Delayed Locking
If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, you must use
it to program this feature. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC, use the
following procedure to change modes:
This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of
the vehicle. When the driver’s power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry lock button is pressed with the
key removed from the ignition, and the driver’s
door open, a chime will sound three times to signal that
the delayed locking system is active. When all doors
have been closed, the doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If any door is opened before this, the
five-second timer will reset itself once all the doors have
been closed again.
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep
all doors closed throughout this procedure.
Pressing the driver’s or passenger’s power door lock
switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter button
again will override this feature.
5. Release the power door lock switch.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door
lock switch throughout this procedure. All the
doors will lock.
3. Press the unlock button on the transmitter. The lock
delay is still off and all doors will remain locked.
4. Press the unlock button on the transmitter again.
Lock delay is now active and all doors will unlock.
To turn this feature off, repeat the previous procedure.
This procedure only changes the mode for the
transmitter used to change this setting.
2-11
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, you must use
it to program this feature. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
Close the doors and turn on the ignition. Every time you
move the shift lever out of PARK (P), all of the doors
will lock. And, every time you stop and move the
shift lever into PARK (P), the doors will unlock. If
someone needs to get out while you’re not in PARK (P),
have that person use the manual door lock control or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. If you need to lock the
doors before shifting out of PARK (P), use the manual
door lock control or power door lock switch.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC, use the
following procedure to change modes:
Personalization Programming
You can program the automatic door locks feature to
change to the following modes:
Mode 0: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock.
Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically
unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when shifted
into PARK (P).
2-12
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep
all doors closed throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door
lock switch throughout this procedure. All the
doors will lock.
3. Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The automatic door locks will remain in
the current mode.
4. Press the lock button on the transmitter again. Each
time this button is pressed, the mode will advance
by one, going from 3 to 0 to 1, etc.
The door locks will cycle according to the mode
entered while customizing the memory door locks.
(Mode 0 has no feedback.)
5. Release the power door lock switch. The automatic
door locks will remain in the most recent mode
selected.
This procedure only changes the mode for the
transmitter used to change this setting.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks that prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your
vehicle from the inside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear seat won’t be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let
adults and older children know how these security locks
work, and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door lock, do the following:
1. Unlock and open the door from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way to the unlock symbol.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
To use one of these locks, do the following:
1. Open the rear door you want to lock.
2. Move the lever located on the inside door edge, all
the way to the lock symbol.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door.
2. Open the door from the outside.
The power door locks will not work if the key is in the
ignition and a door is open. You can override this feature
by holding the driver’s side power door lock switch for
more than three seconds.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and
close the door. Or, press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter after shutting the doors.
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system, see Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
2-13
Trunk
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-14
Trunk Lock Release
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the master
key and turn it clockwise.
Remote Trunk Release Lockout
The TRUNK release button
is located on the driver’s
door trim map pocket.
Push this button to open the trunk. The transaxle must
be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the remote
trunk release button to work.
To lock the trunk from inside your vehicle, insert the
master key and turn it clockwise to LOCK. The VALET
key will not work in this procedure.
Trunk Security Override
The remote keyless entry transmitter will unlock the
trunk even if the trunk release lockout switch is in LOCK.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located near the trunk latch. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle up
to open the trunk from the inside.
2-15
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-16
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
The driver’s and front passenger’s windows have an
express-down feature. Pull the AUTO control back
all the way; release it and the window will lower
automatically. To stop the window from lowering, pull
the AUTO control again. To partially open the window,
pull the AUTO control back slightly. To raise the
window, push and hold the AUTO control forward.
Window Lock Out
Press the LOCK button on the driver’s door armrest to
disable all passenger window controls. The driver’s
window controls will still be operable. If you have
a Driver Information Center (DIC), you can also set the
control to only lock out the rear window controls.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
The power window controls located on the driver’s door
armrest operate each of the windows while the
ignition is on or while Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. In addition, each passenger door has a
control for its own window. See “Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)” under Ignition Positions on page 2-22 for
more information.
Press the LOCK button again to allow passengers to use
their window controls.
Sun Visors
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
When you open the cover to the passenger’s visor
vanity mirror, the lamp will turn on.
Your vehicle may also have a lighted driver’s visor
vanity mirror.
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system. With
this system, the
SECURITY light will flash
as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
This light reminds you to activate the content
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
To activate the system, do the following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter. The
SECURITY light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the SECURITY light goes off.
2-18
If a door is opened without the key or remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will sound
for 30 seconds. The lamps and horn will then turn off to
save battery power.
Remember, the content theft-deterrent system will not
activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the
manual door lock. It activates only if you use a power
door lock switch with a door open, or with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. You should also remember
that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition
key if the alarm has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The alarm will not stop if you try
to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
PASS-Key® III
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the car, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s lamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s lamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This means you don’t have
to do anything different
to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you
insert or remove the key
from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key
may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
2-20
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the
vehicle. This procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will need two current driver’s keys. You must add a step
to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then
continue with Step 3.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY telltale light will turn off once the
key has been programmed. It may not be apparent
that the SECURITY light went on due to how
quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your
dealer to have a new key made.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information.
2-21
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn to five
different positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering
wheel left and right while you turn the key hard.
Turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool
to force it could break the key or the ignition switch.
If none of these works, then your vehicle needs
service.
(C) OFF: This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It does not lock the
steering wheel like LOCK and it does not send any
electrical power to the accessories. The instrument
panel cluster will remain powered in LOCK to illuminate
the gear shift indicator. The cluster will also activate
the parking brake light when the parking brake is
set. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion
while the engine is not running.
(A) ACCESSORY: This position lets you use your
electrical accessories such as power windows, power
sunroof (if equipped), radio and the windshield wipers.
To use, push in the ignition key and turn it toward
you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it
was before you inserted the key.
(B) LOCK: This is the only position in which you can
remove the key. This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature.
2-22
(D) RUN: This is the position the switch returns to after
you start your engine and release the switch. This is
also the position for normal driving. Even when the
engine is not running, you can use RUN to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights.
(E) START: This position starts your engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to RUN for normal driving.
Key Reminder Warning
If you leave your key in OFF, you will hear a warning
chime when you open the driver’s door.
Always leave your key in LOCK while the engine is off.
If you leave it in any other position, you will drain
your battery power.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
After you turn the ignition off and remove the key, you
will still have power to such accessories as the
power windows, audio steering wheel controls (if
equipped), clock, sunroof (if equipped) and the radio for
up to 10 minutes. The instrument panel cluster lights
will stay on for a few seconds, then will go out. Once you
open a door, the power will shut off.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, hold your key
in START for about 10 seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the
normal starting procedure.
2-23
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, above the headlamp
assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-24
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on
the steering column.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-28. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
while the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into
the gear you want. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on
page 2-30.
2-25
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-26
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
• When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
This vehicle has a PUSH
TO RELEASE parking
brake pedal. To set
the parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking
brake pedal with your
left foot.
If the ignition is in RUN or OFF, the brake system
warning light will turn on while the parking brake is set.
The parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with your
left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake
pedal will follow it to the released position.
If you try to drive with the parking brake on, after about
20 feet (6.1 m) a chime will sound continuously until
you release the parking brake. Also, the brake light will
stay on until the parking brake is released.
2-27
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. That section
explains what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-28
• Pull the lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
• Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-28.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition,
you have to fully apply your regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN.
See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF. Open and close the driver’s
door to turn off the RAP feature. (There is no shift
interlock in this key position.)
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you
want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-31
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-25.
2-32
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from any
headlamps behind you. Push the tab away from
you for daytime use; pull it toward you for night use.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror. Your vehicle’s mirror may also contain OnStar®
controls. See OnStar® System on page 2-37 for
more information.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare. This change may take
a few seconds. The mirror will return to its clear
daytime state when the glare is reduced.
For mirrors equipped with OnStar®
controls, press this button to turn on the automatic
dimming feature. To turn off automatic dimming, press
this button again.
O (On/Off):
The indicator light will be illuminated when this feature
is active.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass. Your vehicle’s mirror may
also contain OnStar® controls. See OnStar® System on
page 2-37 for more information.
The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Mirror Operation
AUTO: Press this button to turn on the automatic
dimming feature.
OFF: Press this button to turn off the automatic
dimming feature.
2-33
Mirror Operation
MIRROR: Press this button to turn on the automatic
dimming feature. Press it again to turn off the automatic
dimming feature.
For mirrors equipped with OnStar®
controls, press and hold this button for several seconds
to turn on the automatic dimming feature. Press and
hold it again to turn the automatic dimming feature off.
The green indicator light will come on when this
feature is active. The automatic dimming feature will be
active each time the vehicle is started.
O(On/Off):
Compass Operation
COMPASS: Press this button once to turn the compass
on or off.
For mirrors equipped with OnStar® controls,
press this button once to turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
O(On/Off):
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
2-34
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the letter
C should ever appear in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Mirrors equipped with OnStar® controls can be placed
in calibration mode by pressing and holding the
on/off button until a C is shown in the compass display.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
2. Press and hold COMPASS (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with OnStar® controls) until a
zone number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
the COMPASS button (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with OnStar® controls) quickly until
the correct zone number appears in the display.
Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to
normal operation. If C appears in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration. See
“Compass Calibration” explained previously.
Press the left or right side of the L/R selector switch
located beneath the control pad to choose the left
or right mirror.
To adjust the mirror, press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to move the mirror in the
direction you want it to go. When finished adjusting the
mirrors, leave the L/R selector switch in the center
position, to prevent unwanted mirror movement in case
the control pad is accidentally bumped while driving.
Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
2-35
The mirrors may also have an arrow that flashes when
the turn signal is used. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If you have the Memory Seat and Mirrors feature, the
passenger’s outside rearview mirror includes a tilt-down
feature that operates when the shift lever is in
REVERSE (R). This feature assists the driver, improving
rear obstacle detection. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (R), the passenger mirror will return to
its original position after a five-second delay. This
delay prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear
transitions (REVERSE (R) to AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (X) to REVERSE (R)) occur during a
parallel parking maneuver. This feature can be
programmed on or off through the personal choice
selection menu. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50 for programming instructions.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
2-36
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Automatic Dimming
Heated Mirror
If you have this feature, the outside driver’s mirror will
adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled using the on and off settings on the
automatic dimming rearview mirror. See Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2-33.
When you operate the rear window defogger, the
heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors
are warmed to help clear them of ice and snow. See
“Rear Window Defogger” under Climate Control System
on page 3-24 or Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-26 for more information.
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
Your vehicle may have this feature. OnStar® uses
global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology,
wireless communications, and state of the art call
centers to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your OnStar®-equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button
to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-37
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
HomeLink® Transmitter
OnStar® Personal Calling
With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes
and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
2-38
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of the
steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person
available to assist you in programming the transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2-39
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator light
in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
2-40
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
2-41
Resetting Defaults
®
To reset HomeLink to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box. To
open, lift the latch release on the left side of the
glove box door.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a center console with two storage
compartments and cupholders. The cupholders have
removable liners to hold beverage containers of different
sizes. To access the cupholders and the front storage
area, push the doors covering them back into the
console. In the front storage area you will find a place to
2-42
store a cellular phone, as well as a built-in writing
surface. Underneath this tray is a CD storage area and
another door which can be opened to retrieve items
which may fall into the space between the console and
the sliding door. To access the CD storage area,
place your finger in the oval in the top tray and lift up.
To access the rear storage area, press the lift latch
at the front edge of the armrest and pull up. Inside are
areas which can be used to store a variety of items.
The back of the console may contain either additional
cupholders or air vents for the rear seat passengers.
You will also find two accessory power outlets located
inside the rear storage area. These outlets can be used
for accessories requiring power, such as a cellular
phone. See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-22.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
just inside the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops. For heavier loads, store
them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sunroof. The
sunroof has both manual and express features
for opening the glass panel and sunshade.
The switch for the sunroof
is located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
Comfort Stop: Press and release the switch rearward
to the second position to express open the glass
panel to the comfort stop position. The comfort stop
position is designed to help reduce noise and make
passengers more comfortable.
Express Open: When the glass panel is express
opening, pressing the switch in any direction will stop it
in a partially-opened position. The glass panel may
be fully opened by pressing the switch rearward again.
If you press and hold the switch in the express open
position for more than one and a half seconds, the
express open operation will be overridden and
the sunroof will operate manually.
Close: To close the glass panel, press and hold the
switch forward. As the glass panel reaches the closed
position, it will open slightly toward the vent position and
then drop down to the closed position to provide a
better seal. The sunshade must be closed manually.
The sunroof switch has a number of positions that
control the sunroof movement.
The switch will work only when the ignition is on or
when the RAP is active. See “Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)” under Ignition Positions on page 2-22.
Vent: Once the sunroof is closed, it can be opened to
the vent position by pushing the switch upward. To
close the glass panel, pull the switch downward. The
sunshade must be opened and closed manually for vent
operation.
Open: Press and hold the switch rearward to the
first position to open the glass panel and sunshade. The
sunshade can also be opened manually.
2-43
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat and Mirrors
To save your seat and mirror positions into memory,
use the following procedure:
1. First identify the DRIVER # on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) by pressing the MEMORY button 1
or 2 or by pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and lumbar position to a
safe and comfortable driving position. Adjust both
outside mirrors to suit you. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 2-35.
If your vehicle has this feature, the controls are located
on the driver’s door panel, and are used to program
and recall memory settings for the driver’s seating,
outside mirror positions and climate controls. See
Climate Control System on page 3-24 for more
information.
2-44
3. Press and hold the MEMORY button (1 or 2)
corresponding with your DRIVER # displayed on the
DIC for longer than three seconds. You will hear
two beeps confirming that the seat and mirror
positions have been entered into memory.
To set the seat and mirror positions for a second driver,
follow the previous steps, but start by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter that displays the other
DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use the MEMORY
button which corresponds to the DRIVER # identified by
the second transmitter.
To set the exit position for a second driver, follow the
previous steps, but start by pressing the unlock
button on the transmitter that displays the other
DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use the MEMORY
button which corresponds to the DRIVER # identified by
the other transmitter.
To recall your memory positions, your vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Push and release the MEMORY button
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat
and mirrors will move to the position previously
stored for the identified driver. You will hear one beep.
To recall the exit position, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Push and release the EXIT button and the
seat will move to the exit position previously stored
for the current identified driver. You will hear one beep.
If an exit position has not been stored for the current
identified driver, the seat will move all the way back.
To store the exit position for an easy exit, use the
following procedure:
1. First identify the DRIVER # by pressing the
MEMORY button 1 or 2 or by pressing the unlock
button on the transmitter.
To stop recall movement of the seat at any time, press
the driver’s power seat control located on the outboard
side of the front seat.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
Mirrors and lumbar positions will not be stored or
recalled for the exit position.
3. Press and hold the EXIT button for longer than
three seconds. You will hear two beeps confirming
that the seat exit position has been entered into
memory.
If you would like your stored driving or exit position to
be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
transmitter, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50.
2-45
✍ NOTES
2-46
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-7
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-20
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-23
Climate Controls ............................................3-24
Climate Control System .................................3-24
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-26
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Steering Wheel Climate Controls .....................3-31
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-31
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-32
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-33
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-35
Tachometer .................................................3-35
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-36
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-36
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-37
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-37
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-38
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-40
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-43
Security Light ...............................................3-44
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-44
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-44
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-45
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-46
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-49
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-50
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-55
Setting the Time ...........................................3-55
Radio with CD ..............................................3-56
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-62
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ...........................3-73
Personal Choice Radio Controls ......................3-77
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-78
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-78
3-2
Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-79
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-80
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-81
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-81
Diversity Antenna System ..............................3-81
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(48 Contiguous US States) .........................3-82
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-82
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons (If
Equipped). See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-46.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
D. Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See Steering
Wheel Climate Controls on page 3-31 and Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-78.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-33.
G. Traction Control Button (If Equipped). See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
H. Exterior Lamp Buttons. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14.
I. Head-Up Display (HUD) Controls (If Equipped). See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-20.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
K. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
L. Cruise Controls. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
M. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-55.
N. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 3-24 or Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-26.
O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-42.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. To turn the flashers off, press
the button again.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
3-6
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Press the center area of the steering wheel to sound
the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever
toward you. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable
position and release
the lever to lock the wheel
in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-To-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
For more information on exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-14.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever on the left side of the
steering wheel all the way up or down. The lever returns
automatically when the turn is complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-92.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 0.8 miles
(1.3 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), an arrow will also appear in the display
area to indicate the direction of the turn or lane
change. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-20 for
more information.
You may also have an arrow in the outside mirror that
flashes when the turn signal is used. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 2-35 for more information.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
If the arrows flash very fast as you signal a turn or a
lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
3-8
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam
or high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever
toward you and release it.
While the high beams are
on, this light located on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), this symbol will also appear in the
display area to indicate the high beams are on. See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-20 for more
information.
Flash-To-Pass
LO (Low Speed): Turn the band to LO for steady
wiping at a slow speed.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. It
works even if your headlamps are off.
HI (High Speed): Turn the band to HI for steady wiping
at a high speed.
Pull the turn signal lever toward you briefly to
flash-to-pass.
The wiper speed may be set for a long or short delay
between wipes. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
If the headlamps are off or on low beam, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the
band marked WIPER.
If your windshield wipers are on for more than six
seconds while you are driving, the low-beam headlamps,
instrument panel cluster backlighting and taillamps will
turn on. For more information see “Wiper Activated
Headlamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-14.
OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn the wipers off.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles,
hold the band on MIST longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To
avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them. If your blades do
become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior of the windshield below the
rearview mirror and is used to automatically operate the
wipers. This system operates by monitoring the
amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending
on the driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In
light rain or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy
rain or snow, wipes will occur more frequently.
3-9
The system will operate in the delay, low speed and
high speed modes. If the system is left on for long
periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without any
moisture on the windshield. This is normal and
indicates that the Rainsense™ system is active.
The Rainsense™ system is activated by turning the
wiper control band to one of the five sensitivity levels
within the delay area. The delay position closest to
OFF/MIST is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. The
highest sensitivity setting, level five, is closest to the
LO position. A single wipe will occur each time you turn
the wiper control band to a higher sensitivity level to
indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The MIST and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense™ function. The system
can be overridden at any time by manually changing the
wiper control to LO or HI speed.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the rain
sensor. Doing this could cause the rain sensor
to malfunction.
3-10
Windshield Washer
At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, there is
a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer
fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will
clear the window and either stop or return to your
preset speed. For more washer cycles, push and hold
the paddle.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Ice build up can block washer nozzles. Remove ice for
proper operation.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for more
information.
Cruise Control
The switches to operate cruise control are located on
the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This is helpful on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
{CAUTION:
• Cruise control can be dangerous where
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
you can not drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press SET/COAST and the CRUISE light on the
instrument panel cluster will illuminate.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can briefly press RESUME/ACCEL
(resume/accelerate) to return to your desired
preset speed.
If you press and hold RESUME/ACCEL, the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the button or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
press and hold RESUME/ACCEL.
1. Press ON/OFF to turn cruise control on. An
indicator light near the word CRUISE on the button
will come on.
3-12
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press SET/COAST, then release it and the
accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
• Press RESUME/ACCEL. Hold it there until you get
up to the speed you want, and then release it. To
increase your speed in very small amounts,
briefly press RESUME/ACCEL and then release it.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by pressing SET/COAST.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press SET/COAST until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push
SET/COAST briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take your vehicle
out of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake
or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to attempt to use your
cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press ON/OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp control
buttons are located to the
left of the steering
column.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature turns on the low-beam headlamps,
instrument panel cluster backlighting and taillamps when
the Twilight Sentinel® is in day mode and after the
windshield wipers have been in use for about
six seconds.
To operate the wiper activated headlamps, the Twilight
Sentinel® must be on. If the wiper activated headlamps
are on and the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the
wiper activated headlamps will continue. When you turn
the key to OFF, the wiper activated headlamps will
immediately turn off. The wiper activated headlamps will
also turn off if you turn off the Twilight Sentinel® or
the windshield wipers.
< (Parking Lamps):
Press this button to turn on the
parking lamps, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
O(Headlamps):
Press this button to turn on the
headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and
lights.
3-14
Headlamps On Reminder
If you leave the exterior lamp buttons for the headlamps
or parking lamps on, remove the key from the ignition
and open the driver’s door, you will hear a continuous
warning chime. The chime will turn off when the
lamps are turned off.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors
the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and
Twilight Sentinel®, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
turn on at reduced brightness in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp button for the headlamps is off.
• The transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps
will be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on.
When it is dark enough outside, your low-beam
headlamps will come on. The other lamps that turn on
with your headlamps will also turn on. When it is
bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and
your high-beam headlamps change to the reduced
brightness of DRL.
To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are
parked, turn off the headlamps and move the Twilight
Sentinel® lever all the way toward OFF. The exterior
lamps will turn back on automatically when you move
the transaxle out of PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Cornering Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, the cornering lamps
come on when the headlamps or parking lamps are on
and you signal a turn with the multifunction lever.
They provide more light for cornering.
3-15
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® turns your headlamps on and off by
sensing how dark it is outside.
The lever for this feature is
located to the left of the
steering column.
The exterior lamps can be completely shut off while the
vehicle is in PARK (P) by sliding the Twilight
Sentinel® lever all the way to OFF. To turn the exterior
lamps back on, slide the lever toward MAX again,
or shift out of PARK (P).
Park Lamp Override Feature
If the Twilight Sentinel® lighting is active, it can be
disabled by turning on the manual parking lamps. The
lighting will be disabled until the ignition is moved from
RUN or until the outside light level becomes daylight. The
outside light level changing to daylight will cause the
Twilight Sentinel® feature to deactivate. The
wiper-activated headlamps will override the twilight
disable feature.
Light Sensor
To operate it, leave the exterior lamp button off.
If you slide the lever all the way to MAX, your
headlamps will remain on for about three minutes after
you turn off your engine. As you slide the lever
toward OFF, the headlamps will turn off more quickly.
You can change this delay time from only a few seconds
to three minutes.
Your Twilight
Sentinel® and DRL work
with the light sensor
located on top of the
instrument panel.
Do not cover it up. If you do, the sensor will read “dark”
and the Twilight Sentinel® lighting will turn on.
3-16
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Interior Lamps
If the exterior lamp button has been left on, the exterior
lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned to LOCK and a door has been opened.
This protects against draining the battery in case you
have accidentally left the headlamps or parking
lamps on. If you need to leave the lamps on for more
than 10 minutes, use the manual control to turn the
lamps back on after the ignition is turned to LOCK and
any door is opened. To delay the lamps from turning
off, see “Twilight Sentinel®” under Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The lever for this feature is
located to the left of the
steering column.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be
adjusted by sliding the INTERIOR lever from LO to HI.
The instrument panel lights will be on only while the
parking lamps are on. The interior courtesy lamps can
be turned on by sliding the INTERIOR lever all the
way to HI.
3-17
Courtesy Lamps
Delayed Exit Lighting
If it is dark enough outside, when any door is opened,
several lamps go on. They make it easy for you to enter
and leave the vehicle. You can also turn these lamps
on by sliding the INTERIOR lever all the way to the top.
If it is dark enough outside when you remove the key
from the ignition, the interior lamps will turn on and stay
on for about 25 seconds. This will give you time to
find the door pull handle or lock switches. Once the key
is inserted into the ignition the exit lighting will be
cancelled and the lighting will fade out.
Entry Lighting
If it is dark enough outside when you press the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
interior courtesy lamps will turn on and stay on for about
40 seconds. The lamps will turn off immediately by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, turning the ignition key to RUN or activating
the power door locks.
Delayed Entry Lighting
If it is dark enough outside when you open the door, the
interior lamps will turn on. When you close the door with
the ignition off, the interior lamps will stay on for up to
25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to an on position.
When the lamps turn off as a result of the 25 second timer
or the ignition switch being turned on, the lighting will
deactivate by way of the theater dimming effect. Locking
the doors will override the delayed entry lighting feature
and the lamps will turn off right away.
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five-second fade out of
the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.
3-18
Perimeter Lighting
If it is dark enough outside when the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the
DRL, parking lamps and back-up lamps will come on.
Personal Choice Programming
This feature can be programmed in the on or off mode
for each transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you must use it to program this feature.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
To turn the feature off, do the following:
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep
all doors closed throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock
switch throughout this procedure. All the doors
will lock.
3. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter. Perimeter
lighting remains on at this time and the horn will
chirp two times.
Front Reading Lamps
4. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will
chirp one time.
5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting
feature is now off.
To turn the feature on, do the following:
1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep
all doors closed throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock
switch throughout this procedure. All the doors
will lock.
3. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter. Perimeter
lighting now remains off at this time and the horn
will chirp one time.
4. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn
will chirp two times.
5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting
feature is now on.
This procedure only changes the mode for the
transmitter used to change this setting.
The front reading lamps, located on the headliner, are
turned on or off by pressing one of the buttons
located near each lamp.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or garage door opener.
When the ignition is turned off, the power to these
features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any
door is opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp
switch is turned on. To restore power back to the
cigarette lighters the ignition must be turned back
to RUN.
3-19
Battery Load Management
Head-Up Display (HUD)
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a
higher RPM setting than normal to make sure the
battery charges. High electrical loads may occur when
several of the following are on: headlamps, high beams,
rear window defogger, fan at high speed, heated
seats (if equipped) and engine cooling fans.
If your vehicle’s battery remains in a heavy discharge
condition for a long period of time, the fan, rear
defogger, heated seats and heated mirrors will be
disabled and the DIC will display BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE. This can happen either under long periods of
idling or low speed driving with high electrical loading,
or in the event of a charging system fault.
{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), you can see some of the driver
information that appears on your instrument panel
cluster.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as a reflection in the windshield.
The HUD consists of the following information:
•
•
•
•
3-20
Speedometer Reading
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Headlamp Indicator
Check Gages Message
The HUD shows these images when they are lighted on
the instrument panel cluster.
The HUD controls are located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light.
1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer lever
all the way up.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
an internal photo-cell, and where you have the
HUD dimmer control set.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a
parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as
a parking aid.
2. Adjust the seat to your driving position. Press the
image height adjuster switch to raise the image as
far as possible.
3-21
3. Now press the image height adjuster switch to
position the image as low as possible, while still
keeping it in full view.
4. Slide the dimmer lever downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary.
To turn the HUD display off, slide the dimmer lever all
the way down.
If the sun comes out and the sky becomes cloudy, you
may need to adjust the HUD brightness using the
dimmer lever. Polarized sunglasses could make the
HUD image harder to see.
To change the display from English to metric units, push
the ENG/MET button located to the left of the steering
column.
Clean the inside of the windshield as necessary to
remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, spray household glass cleaner
on a soft, clean cloth. Gently wipe and dry the HUD
lens. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens to avoid
cleaner leaking inside the unit.
If the ignition is on and you can’t see the HUD image,
check to see if:
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The HUD dimmer lever is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-92.
3-22
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
system. If you ever have your windshield replaced,
be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or your HUD
image may look blurred or out of focus.
Accessory Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB
radio.
Your vehicle may have up to three power outlets
depending on the type of front seat you have. If your
vehicle has front bucket seats with a center console, you
will find two outlets inside the rear storage compartment.
An extra power outlet can be found in the ashtray.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be pulled
down to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
The accessory power outlets will only operate when the
ignition key is in RUN and for 10 minutes after turning
the ignition off. If you would like the outlets to operate
regardless of ignition position, and for extended periods
of time, see “Engine Compartment Fuse Block” under
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92 or contact
your dealer.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible to
the accessory power outlets and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Pull down the front center tray to reveal the front
ashtray, cigarette lighter and accessory power outlet.
The front center and rear ashtrays may be removed for
cleaning. Hold the sides of the ashtray and then pull
the ashtray up and out.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To use a lighter, push the center all the way in and let it
go. When it is ready, the center will pop back out by
itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
The cigarette lighter will only operate when the ignition
key is in RUN and for 10 minutes after turning the
ignition off. If you would like the lighter to operate
regardless of ignition position, and for extended periods
of time, see “Engine Compartment Fuse Block” under
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92 or see
your dealer.
3-23
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
RECIRC (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or
off. When the button is pressed, an indicator light
will come on. You may not use RECIRC with FRONT
defrost or BLEND.
VENT: This mode directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
HTR (Heater): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
TEMPERATURE: This lever is used to adjust the
temperature of the air coming through the system.
Moving the lever between COOL and WARM will change
the temperature of the air coming through your outlets.
9 FAN:
Move this lever to select the speed of
the fan. Moving the lever between LOW and HIGH will
decrease or increase the fan speed. The fan will be
off when the system is off.
3-24
BLEND: This mode splits the airflow between the
windshield and the floor outlets. The air conditioning
compressor will be operating.
OFF: The ventilation system always allows fresh air to
flow through your vehicle when it is moving. The
system will try to keep the air at a previously chosen
temperature. When the system is off, the blower fan is
also off.
MAX (Maximum Air Conditioning): This mode directs
airflow through the instrument panel outlets. The
amount of outside air entering your vehicle is limited.
Also in this mode, the RECIRC function is activated to
create the maximum cooling effect in the vehicle. If
RECIRC was activated before selecting MAX, the light
in the RECIRC button will go off. If RECIRC is
selected after MAX, the light in the RECIRC button will
not come on.
NORM (Normal Air Conditioning): This mode cools
the outside air entering your vehicle and directs it
through the instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEV (Bi-Level Air Conditioning): This mode directs
about half of the air to the instrument panel outlets,
and then directs most of the remaining air to the floor
outlets. Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is
on in this mode.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select MAX.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Sensors
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and the air inside of your vehicle, then uses the
information to maintain the selected temperature by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. This mode allows you to clear fog or
frost from your windshield.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
3-25
1 FRONT (Defrost):
Pressing this button directs
most of the air to the windshield and the outboard outlets
(for the side windows), with some air directed to the
floor outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off recirculation and run the air conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the FRONT defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle
until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
= REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible.
At speeds above 35 mph (55 km/h), the defogger will
operate continuously until you press the REAR
button again. After 10 minutes of driving below 35 mph
(55 km/h), the defogger will turn off automatically. If
you need additional warming time, push the button
again. The system will then operate for five minutes
before going off by itself.
3-26
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger
button is pressed.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
Manual Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode and the fan speed.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to 75° F (24° C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Pressing the FAN or AIR FLOW buttons cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
operation.
TEMP (Temperature): To manually adjust the
temperature inside the vehicle, push the TEMP arrow.
Push the TEMP up arrow for warmer temperature
settings and the TEMP down arrow for cooler
temperature settings. The setting will be shown on the
display. The display will return to the outside
temperature after a few seconds.
9 FAN:
Pressing the FAN button will display and hold
the current fan speed while in manual mode. If you
want the fan to run at a lower speed, push the down
arrow on the FAN button. If you want to increase the fan
speed, push the up arrow on the FAN button.
AIR FLOW: Pressing the AIR FLOW button will display
and hold the current setting while in manual mode.
3-27
Use the up and down arrows on the AIR FLOW button
to cycle through the available modes.
• WINDSHIELD-FLOOR: This mode directs most of
the airflow to the windshield with some airflow to
the outboard outlets (for the side windows) and the
floor outlets.
• MID: This mode directs airflow through the
instrument panel outlets.
• MID-FLOOR: This mode directs airflow through both
the floor and the instrument panel outlets. There is
also a small amount of air directed to the windshield
and the outboard outlets (for the side windows).
• FLOOR: This mode directs most of the airflow to
the floor outlets with some directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and the windshield.
OFF: Press the OFF button once to turn off the
passenger climate control, if it has been activated.
Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the
main system. The outside temperature will be shown
on the display when the system is off.
VENT (Flow-Through Ventilation): Pressing the VENT
button allows outside air to flow through your vehicle
without the air conditioning compressor working. To turn
off the VENT selection, press the VENT button again.
Selecting the VENT and AUTO buttons at the same time
allows the system to control the airflow automatically
without using the air conditioning compressor or
the recirculation mode.
3-28
RECIRC (Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air coming into the vehicle. It can be
used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. When the button is pressed, an indicator
light will come on. The recirculation mode cannot be used
with the FRONT defrost or VENT mode.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot air escape; then
close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, press the AUTO button
and the system will automatically enter recirculation
mode and the temperature will be at the full cold position
for maximum cooling.
Using these settings together for long periods of time may
cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too dry. To
prevent this from happening, after the air in your vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Sensors
Rear Window Defogger
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and the air inside of your vehicle, then uses the
information to maintain the selected temperature by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly.
1 FRONT:
Press the FRONT button to defrost the
windshield by directing airflow toward the windshield and
outboard outlets (for the side windows). To turn off
FRONT, press the AUTO or AIR FLOW buttons.
If the AIR FLOW up button is pressed while in the
FRONT defrost mode, the system will direct the
air toward the instrument panel outlets. If the AIR FLOW
down button is pressed while in the FRONT defrost
mode, the system will direct the air toward the floor, and
the FRONT defrost mode will cancel. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
= REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible.
At speeds above 35 mph (55 km/h), the defogger will
operate continuously until you press the REAR
button again. After 10 minutes of driving below 35 mph
(55 km/h), the defogger will turn off automatically. If
you need additional warming time, push the button
again. The system will then operate for five minutes
before going off by itself.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger
button is pressed.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-29
Passenger Temperature Control
If your vehicle has this feature, then the driver and the
front-seat passenger can select separate temperature
settings. This feature allows the passenger to select
a temperature that is 5° F (3° C) warmer or cooler than
the driver’s selected temperature. The control is
located on the passenger’s door armrest.
Press the red button for a warmer temperature or the
blue button for a cooler temperature. Press the
OFF button on the main system once to turn off the
passenger’s temperature control. Press the OFF button
twice to turn off the entire climate control system.
3-30
Outlet Adjustment
Use the levers located in
the middle of the front
outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
In vehicles equipped with
rear seat outlets, you can
adjust the direction of
the airflow using the lever
in the center of each
outlet. Use the thumbwheel
located between the
outlets to turn them on
and off.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Steering Wheel Climate Controls
If your vehicle has this
feature, you can control
the temperature function
by using the switch located
on your steering wheel.
w TEMP x (Temperature): Press the up or down
arrow on this switch to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Climate Controls Personalization
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, up to two
drivers are able to store and recall climate control
settings for the temperature, the fan speed and the
direction of the airflow.
Memory buttons 1 and 2 are located on the driver’s
door panel and correspond to the numbers 1 or 2 found
on the back of each remote keyless entry transmitter.
To store settings, do the following:
1. Select the desired temperature, fan speed and
airflow mode. If desired, a separate temperature
setting may also be selected for the front seat
passenger. For information on how to do this, see
Dual Automatic Climate Control System on
page 3-26.
2. Locate memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s
door panel.
3. Press the memory button on the door panel that
corresponds to the number on the back of the
transmitter you are programming, until you hear two
beeps. The beeps confirm that your selection has
been saved and can now be recalled. For more
information on the memory feature, see Memory
Seat and Mirrors on page 2-44.
Follow these steps each time you want to change the
stored settings.
3-31
To recall the climate control settings last stored on your
transmitter, press the unlock button on your remote
keyless entry transmitter and put the ignition in
ACCESSORY or RUN. The settings will be recalled.
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-32
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly — and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a DIC that works along with
the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
The volume of your vehicle’s warning chimes can be
adjusted. For information see Chime Level Adjustment
on page 3-82.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters, which includes indicator warning lights
and gages that are explained on the following pages.
Standard Cluster (United States version shown, Canada similar)
3-33
Cluster With Tachometer (United States version shown, Canada similar)
3-34
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers. Press the
ENG/MET button which is located to the left of the
speedometer to change from mph to km/h.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
A trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last set it to zero. To reset it, push the TRIP
RESET button. If your vehicle is equipped with a
DIC, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45
for information on resetting the trip odometer.
Tachometer
If your vehicle has this
feature, the tachometer
tells you how fast the
engine is running.
It displays engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-35
Safety Belt Reminder Light
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then flash for several more.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
{CAUTION:
Air Bag Readiness Light
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks
the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the air bag system,
see Air Bag Systems on page 1-47.
3-36
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Battery Warning Light
When you turn the key to
RUN, this light will turn on
briefly to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems
are working.
If the light stays on, a chime will sound indicating that
the vehicle needs service. You should take your vehicle
to the dealer as soon as possible. To save the battery
until you get there, turn off all accessories and set
the climate control system to OFF.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on when you turn the key to
RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-37
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If you try to drive off with the parking brake
set, a chime will also come on until you release the
parking brake. If the light stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
3-38
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when your engine
is started and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays
on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. This
is normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles equipped with
the traction control system,
this warning light should
come on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the button
located on the end of the gearshift lever, the
warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the
system back on, press the button again. The
warning light should go off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
• If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the pointer
moves into the shaded
area, the engine is too hot.
Standard version
shown, uplevel similar
A temperature indicator light will turn on and a chime
will sound.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-40
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-41
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-42
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has the
standard instrument panel
cluster, this light will
come on if there is a
problem with your vehicle’s
engine oil pressure.
If your vehicle has the optional gage cluster, you can
read your oil pressure directly from the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-46.
The oil pressure light will come on briefly when you turn
your key to RUN. That’s just a check to be sure the
light works. This is normal and doesn’t show a problem.
If it doesn’t come on and then go off, be sure to have
it fixed so it will be there to warn you if there is a
problem.
When this light comes on and stays on, and a chime
sounds, it means oil isn’t going through the engine
properly. The oil could be low, or there might be some
other oil problem. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-43
Security Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system. With
this system, the
SECURITY light will flash
as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
For more information see Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-18.
Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light comes
on when you set the
vehicle’s cruise control.
For more information see “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
3-44
This light will come on and
stay on if your vehicle has
certain non-emission
related problems.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect
vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified
dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle
performance.
This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
on to show that it is working properly.
Fuel Gage
Here are some things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated half full, but it took more (or less) than
half the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• The gage moves up a little when you turn a corner,
speed up or make a hard stop.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
United States
Canada
The fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your
tank. It works only when the ignition is on. When
the indicator moves to the edge of the low fuel warning
band, the low fuel warning light will come on and a
chime will sound. You still have a little fuel left, but you
need to get more fuel right away.
off the ignition.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC). The DIC will display information about
how your vehicle is functioning, as well as warning
messages if a system problem is detected. This feature
also allows two different drivers to store and recall
their own personal choice settings. See “DIC Controls
and Displays” following for more information.
3-45
DIC Controls and Displays
When you turn the ignition on, the DIC will display your
DRIVER NUMBER. You can have your dealer
program your name to appear on this display line. See
your dealer for more information.
The following buttons are
on the DIC control panel
which is located to
the left of the steering
column:
The system will then perform a status check and display
any messages if a problem is detected. If there are
no problems detected, the display will return to the mode
selected by that driver the last time the ignition was
turned off.
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will
appear in the display. The following pages will show the
messages you may see on the DIC display.
The message center is continuously updated with the
vehicle’s performance status.
3-46
ODO/TRIP (Odometer/Trip): Press this button for the
display to show the total mileage, and Trip 1 or
Trip 2 miles. Trip 1 and Trip 2 will display the miles
traveled since the last reset. To reset the trip odometer,
press the ODO/TRIP button until the preferred trip
number (1 or 2) is shown in the DIC display, then press
the RESET button. The trip odometer will now
accumulate miles until the next reset.
FUEL INFO (Information): Press this button to display
fuel information.
Press the FUEL INFO button until the display shows
FUEL ECONOMY AVERAGE. Average fuel economy is
viewed as a long term approximation of your overall
driving conditions. To learn the average fuel economy
from a new starting point, press the RESET button while
the average fuel economy is displayed in the DIC.
Press the FUEL INFO button until the display shows
FUEL ECONOMY INST. Instantaneous fuel economy
varies with your driving conditions, such as acceleration,
braking and the grade of the road being traveled. The
RESET button does not function in this mode.
Press the FUEL INFO button until the display shows
FUEL RANGE. The fuel range will calculate the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling. This
calculation is based on the average fuel economy for
the last 25 miles (40.25 km) driven, and the fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. The RESET button does not
function in this mode.
GAGE INFO (Information): Use this button to display
oil pressure, oil life, coolant temperature, tire pressure
and battery information.
Press the GAGE INFO button until OIL PRESSURE
appears in the display. If there are no problems detected
with the oil pressure, the display will show OIL
PRESSURE NORMAL. If a low oil pressure condition is
detected, the display will show OIL PRESSURE
LOW. If you see the OIL PRESSURE LOW message,
your vehicle could be low on oil or the oil is not
going through the engine properly. See your dealer
for service.
Press the GAGE INFO button until COOLANT TEMP
appears in the display. If there are no problems detected
with the temperature, COOLANT TEMP NORMAL will
appear in the display. If the temperature is too high,
COOLANT TEMP HOT will appear in the display. If you
see the COOLANT TEMP HOT message, the engine
is overheated. You should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off your engine as soon as
possible. This manual explains what to do. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-26.
Press the GAGE INFO button until the display shows
BATTERY STATE. If the voltage is normal the display
will show BATTERY STATE NORMAL. If the voltage
drops below 10.5 volts, the display will show BATTERY
STATE LOW. If the voltage is above 16.2 volts, the
display will show BATTERY STATE HIGH. If the display
shows the high or low message, you need to have
your battery and charging system checked.
3-47
Press the GAGE INFO button until OIL LIFE INDEX
appears in the display. The OIL LIFE INDEX NORMAL
display will show an estimate of the oil’s remaining
useful life. When the oil life index is less than 10 percent,
the display will show OIL LIFE INDEX CHANGE OIL.
When you have the oil changed according to the
maintenance schedule, you will have to reset the oil life
monitor. See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
on page 6-4. To reset the Oil Life System, see
Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Press the GAGE INFO button until TIRE PRESSURE
appears in the display. TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL
is displayed when the check tire pressure system
believes your vehicle’s tire pressures are normal. If a
potential tire pressure problem is detected, the display
will show CHECK TIRE PRESSURE.
If you see the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message, you
should stop as soon as you can and check all your
tires for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-73. Also check the tire pressure in all four
tires as soon as you can. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-65 and Check Tire Pressure System on
page 5-66. There are times when you will have to reset
(calibrate) the Check Tire Pressure System. See
Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-66.
3-48
RESET: This button, used along with other buttons, will
reset system functions.
ENG/MET (English/Metric): Use this button to change
the display between English and metric units.
DIC messages can be displayed in one of three
languages: English, French or Spanish. The language
of the display is set by pressing both the FUEL
INFO and RESET buttons for five seconds. As the
buttons are held, each language will be displayed for
three seconds. Release the FUEL INFO and RESET
buttons when the desired language is displayed. All DIC
messages will now be in the selected language.
Language selection can also be done through the DIC
Personal Choice Programming. See “Language
Selection” later in this section.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Other messages or warnings may appear in the DIC
display. For Canadian drivers, in addition to the
DIC message your DIC will display EXP with a number
after it which reflects the following messages:
EXP
(Export ID) Warning Message
20
TURN SIGNAL STILL ON?
24
TRUNK AJAR
25
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LOW
27
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
36
ENGINE OIL LOW – CHECK LEVEL
40
THEFT ATTEMPT DETECTED
54
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
55
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE
61
GAS CAP LOOSE – CHECK CAP
81
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
91
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM ACTIVE
102
CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM
139
DOOR AJAR
144
CHECK TIRE PRESSURES
The EXP codes are used to make translation from
English to other languages easier.
Pressing any of the DIC control buttons will remove the
messages or warnings from the DIC display.
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM – 54: If you ever see
the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message, it
means there may be a problem with your stability
enhancement system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system: stop, turn off the engine, then start the
engine again. If the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
message still comes on, it means there is a problem.
You should see your dealer for service. Reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE – 55: You may see the
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver
Information Center. It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you
are steering. This stability enhancement system
activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is
just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of
ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the system
is on, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message is on,
you should continue to steer in the direction you want
to go. The system is designed to help you in bad
weather or other difficult driving situations by making the
most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the
STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message comes on, you
will know that something has caused your vehicle to
start to spin, so you should consider slowing down.
3-49
DIC Vehicle Personalization
The DIC can be used to program the following personal
choice features available with your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Door Locks
Window Lock Out
Security Feedback
Delayed Locking
Perimeter Lighting
Memory Seats
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
Driver ID
Language Selection
The personal choice settings displayed on the DIC are
determined by the transmitter used to enter the
vehicle. Each remote keyless entry transmitter was
pre-programmed to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2
and is numbered on the back. After the unlock button on
a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed and the
ignition is in RUN, the DIC will display the identified
driver and recall the settings previously programmed for
that driver. The settings can also be recalled by
briefly pressing one of the MEMORY buttons located on
the driver’s door.
3-50
If you unlock the vehicle using your door key instead of
your transmitter, the DIC will not change drivers and
will recall the information from the last transmitter used
or the last driver using the memory seat controls. If
this happens and you were not the last driver of
the vehicle, simply press your correct driver number on
the memory seat controls or press the unlock button
on your remote keyless entry transmitter.
Use the following steps for personalization programming
instructions.
1. Turn the ignition on and keep the transaxle in
PARK (P).
2. Inform the DIC which driver you are by pressing the
unlock button on your remote keyless entry
transmitter or the appropriate memory seat control.
3. Press and hold the ENG/MET button for five
seconds. WELCOME TO BUICK OPTION
FEATURE will appear in the display.
4. The first choice to be made will be DRIVER
ID 1 or 2. Press the ENG/MET button to toggle
between your selections within a display and
RESET to choose the current selection and move
on to the next personal choice feature.
If you would like to exit the selection mode without
moving through each of the personal choice features,
simply press a different button on the DIC or turn off the
ignition. Whatever personal choices you made will
still be retained, even without passing through each of
the features. In order for your personal choices to save,
you must press RESET after making your selections.
If you happen to move past a selection you would like to
make a personal choice for, press the unlock button
on your remote keyless entry transmitter or press
the appropriate driver number on the seat control. This
will return you to the beginning of the option feature
programming mode.
Automatic Door Locks
The door lock modes when shifting in and out of
PARK (P), can be changed through the DIC. You can
change these modes by different selections of the
following DIC displays:
•
•
•
•
AUTO DOOR LOCKS – OFF/ON
UNLOCK – OFF/ON
UNLOCK – KEY OFF/PARK
DOOR TO UNLOCK – DRIVER/ALL
If you choose OFF for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, your door
locks will operate normally with no automatic feature.
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, ON for
UNLOCK and KEY OFF, your doors will lock every time
you shift out of PARK (P), and the doors will unlock
every time you stop and turn the ignition to OFF.
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, ON for
UNLOCK and PARK, your doors will lock every time you
shift out of PARK (P), and the doors will unlock every
time you stop and shift into PARK (P).
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, and OFF
for UNLOCK, your doors will lock every time you
shift out of PARK (P), and there will be no automatic
door unlock when shifting back into PARK (P).
If you choose ON for UNLOCK and DRIVER for DOOR
TO UNLOCK, only the driver’s door will automatically
unlock when shifting into PARK or turning the key
to OFF.
If you choose ON for UNLOCK and ALL for DOOR TO
UNLOCK, all doors will automatically unlock when
shifting into PARK or turning the key to OFF.
To change modes, do the following:
1. Move the arrow on the display between the
selections by pressing the ENG/MET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the
RESET button and your choice will be retained
in memory.
See Progrmmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-12
for more information about this feature.
3-51
Window Lock Out
Security Feedback
The number of passenger windows locked out by the
window LOCK switch can be programmed through
the DIC.
By choosing different combinations of these selections,
you can choose the type of transmitter activated
feedback when locking and unlocking your vehicle with
your transmitter. Each time you make a selection by
pressing the ENG/MET button, press the RESET button
to record your choice.
If you choose R + PASS, all three passenger window
switches will be inactive when the window LOCK switch
is enabled.
If you choose REAR, only the two rear passenger
window switches will be locked out when the window
LOCK switch is enabled.
To change modes, do the following:
1. Move the arrow on the display between R + PASS
and REAR by pressing the ENG/MET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the
RESET button. Your choice will be retained in
memory.
For more information on this feature, see “Window Lock
Out” under Power Windows on page 2-17.
3-52
• KEYLESS FEEDBACK – OFF/ON
• LIGHTS FEEDBACK – OFF/ON
• HORN FEEDBACK – OFF/ON
If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK you will
also need to choose LIGHTS and/or HORN FEEDBACK.
You can select the following modes:
If you choose OFF for KEYLESS FEEDBACK, you will
receive no security feedback when locking or
unlocking your vehicle.
If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and ON for
LIGHTS FEEDBACK, the exterior lamps will flash
twice when unlocking your vehicle and once when
locking your vehicle.
If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and ON for
HORN FEEDBACK, your horn will chirp when all
doors are unlocked and when locking your vehicle.
If you choose ON for KEYLESS, LIGHTS and HORN
FEEDBACK, your exterior lamps will flash twice at
the first unlock button press, your exterior lamps will
flash twice and the horn will chirp once at the second
unlock button press, and the exterior lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp once when locking your vehicle.
For more information on this feature, see “Security
Feedback” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5.
Delayed Locking
This feature, which delays the locking of the vehicle,
can be made active or inactive through the DIC. When
DELAYED LOCKING – OFF/ON appears on the
display, use the ENG/MET button to toggle the arrow
between OFF and ON. When you have made your
choice, press the RESET button to record your
selection.
For more information on this feature, see Delayed
Locking on page 2-11.
Perimeter Lighting
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to turn on the DRL (high-beams at reduced
intensity), parking lamps and back-up lamps if it is
dark enough according to the Twilight Sentinel®.
You can control activation of this feature by choosing
OFF or ON when the PERIMETER LIGHTS choice
is displayed on the DIC. Make your choice by pressing
the ENG/MET button and record your choice by
pressing the RESET button. You will then be prompted
to choose a TIMEOUT period. See “Exterior Lights”
following for more information.
For more information on this feature, see “Perimeter
Lighting” under Interior Lamps on page 3-17.
Exterior Lights
The EXTERIOR LIGHTS/TIMEOUT feature can be
changed to a desired setting by using the ENG/MET to
toggle from 5 to 30 seconds. Each toggle will increase
the time by five seconds. Once the desired timeout
is displayed, press RESET to record your choice and
move on to the next personal choice feature.
3-53
Memory Seats
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the memory seat and
mirror positions will be recalled for the identified
driver when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used
to enter the vehicle.
If your vehicle has the outside curb view assist mirror,
which tips the passenger mirror down while the vehicle is
in REVERSE (R), it can be made active or inactive
through the DIC. When TILT MIRRORS – OFF/ON
appears on the display, use the ENG/MET button to
toggle the arrow between OFF and ON. When you have
made your choice, press the RESET button to record
your selection. For more information on this feature, see
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-36.
You can program this feature to be active by choosing
ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears, or
inactive by choosing OFF when the SEAT RECALL
choice appears on the DIC. Make your choices
by pressing the ENG/MET button and store them to
memory by pressing the RESET button.
You can also program this feature to recall your
memory seat position or the exit seat position.
MEMORY: Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL
choice appears, and then choose MEMORY when the
RECALL POSITION choice appears.
EXIT: Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL choice
appears, and then choose EXIT when the RECALL
POSITION choice appears. The seat will move when
you enter the vehicle after unlocking it with a remote
keyless entry transmitter. This will allow for easy entry.
For more information on this feature, see Memory
Seat and Mirrors on page 2-44.
3-54
Driver ID
This feature displays the DRIVER ID, as identified by
the DIC. If this feature is ON, the DRIVER ID will
be displayed every time the ignition is turned on. If the
DRIVER ID is OFF, the DRIVER ID can be displayed
by pressing either a button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a memory seat button.
Language Selection
After DRIVER ID has been selected, “Language
English” will be displayed. Pressing the RESET button
selects English as the DIC language and ends
programming. If you prefer the language to be French
or Spanish, press the ENG/MET button when “Language
English” appears on the display. Hold the ENG/MET
button until the desired language is displayed, then
press the RESET button to select that language.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-22.
Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM will appear for morning hours. Press
and hold M until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold H and M at the same time until TIME UPDATED
appears on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
3-55
Radio with CD
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, push
the TUNE/AUDIO button repeatedly until SPEED
VOL is displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO button to
select OFF, MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher choice
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to
use SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose a radio station.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
3-56
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN
and the preset number appear on the display. You
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are
in the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, or
TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero or TREBLE
and a zero will appear on the display.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2 and six AM) by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
4. Press EQ to select the EQ setting. It will be stored
with the preset station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. When you hear the radio produce one
beep, release the pushbutton. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you
set will return.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob
to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound
is balanced between the right and the left speakers.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-57
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears
on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar
graph with indicators will show how the sound is
balanced between the front and rear speakers.
Using RDS
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator
will be centered on the display.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to choose bass, mid
and treble equalization settings designed for different
program types.
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display,
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-58
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed
on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and P-TYPE is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow once. If the category is not displayed,
press either SEEK arrow twice to display the
category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on
the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will remain in
the last chosen position.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If a compact disc is playing,
play will stop during the announcement. You will not
be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow again to stop at
a particular station.
3-59
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you
will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.
3-60
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn of the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If this
message appears on the display it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealership for service.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is
off, first press the eject button or DISP.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single
discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs
and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard
adapter disc.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Errors” later in this section.
1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Release is it to play the
passage. You will hear sound at a reduced level.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Release it to play
the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced level.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change what is
normally shown on the display (track or elapsed time),
press this button until you see the display you want, then
hold the button until the display flashes.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If you hold the button or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving back through the disc.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the disc.
To scan CD tracks, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the
display. You will hear a beep. The disc will go to the next
track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
track. The sound will mute and SCAN and the track
number will appear on the display while scanning. The
disc will only scan forward. Press one of the SEEK
arrows again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing.
CD: Press this button to change to playing a CD when
listening to the radio.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD.
3-61
Compact Disc Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road is smoother, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays
an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-62
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, press the
TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly until SPEED VOL is
displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO knob to select OFF,
MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as
you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(USA Only)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): Press this button to display the time
when the ignition is turned off.
For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), press this button
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
3-63
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM, XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The
display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA
only, if equipped), by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose a radio station.
1. Turn the radio on.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, XM1
or XM2.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
3. Tune in the desired station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until SCAN
and the preset number appear on the display. You
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to the stations that
are in the selected band and only to those with a
strong signal.
3-64
4. Press EQ to select the EQ setting. It will be stored
with the preset station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. When you hear the radio produce one
beep, release the pushbutton. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you
set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, or
TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob
to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound
is balanced.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero or TREBLE
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to choose bass, mid
and treble equalization settings designed for different
program types.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears
on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar
graph with indicators will show how the sound is
balanced.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator
will be centered on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.
3-65
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The P-TYPE symbol will be
displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
category by performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on
the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow again to stop at
a particular station.
3-66
If both P-TYP and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If a
cassette tape or compact disc is being used, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. When
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the
brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to
go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the
display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if
the volume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette
tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If this
message appears on the display it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealership for service.
3-67
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-68
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, you
may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-69
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape
can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear
nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape
and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME and AUDIO
controls just as you do for the radio. The display will
show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition or radio
is off, first press the eject button or DISP. Cassette tape
adapter kits for portable compact disc players will
work in your cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1s(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape reverses.
Press it again to return to playing speed.
2 \(Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. The radio will play
while the tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to
return to playing speed.
3-70
6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
© SEEK ¨: Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for seek to
work. Press the left or the right arrow to go to the
previous or to the next selection on the tape. SEEK and
a negative or positive number will be displayed.
Pressing the left or right arrow multiple times will
increase the number of selections to be searched up to
-5 or +5. If -5 or +5 is shown on the display the
cassette tape player will fast forward or rewind through
the four selections and stop at the fifth selection.
To scan cassette tape selections, press and hold one of
the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCN appears
on the display. You will hear a beep. The tape will go to
the next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next selection. The cassette tape will only
scan forward. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
a CD when listening to the radio.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a tape.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
If an error message appears while trying to play a
cassette tape, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
• TIGHT TAPE: The tape is tight and the player can’t
turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape
with the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• BROKEN TAPE: The tape is broken. Try a
new tape.
CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the
display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-80.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be
corrected, contact your dealership. If your radio displays
an error number, write it down and provide it to your
dealership when reporting the problem.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
4. Press and hold the CD TAPE button until READY is
displayed.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is
off, first press the eject button or DISP.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-71
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single
discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs
and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard
adapter disc.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Errors” later in this section.
the display (track or elapsed time), press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If you hold the button or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving back through
the disc.
Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If
you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. You will hear sound.
To scan CD tracks, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display. You will hear a beep. The disc will go to the
next track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next track. The disc will only scan forward. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
CD TAPE: Press this button to change to playing a
cassette tape or a CD when listening to the radio.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change the default on
3-72
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD.
Compact Disc Messages
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play
up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may
be played using the trays supplied in the magazine.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error number, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Notice: Placing heavy objects, which may shift or
slide while driving, in the trunk could damage
the CD changer. If your vehicle has the optional CD
changer, do not put heavy objects in the trunk.
3-73
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds
one disc. Slide the button on the top of the magazine
and gently pull out one of the trays. Load the trays from
top to bottom, placing a disc on the tray label side
up. If you load a disc with the label side down, the disc
will not play and an error will occur. Gently push the
tray back into the magazine slot until it locks into place.
Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in
the magazine.
3-74
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer.
Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of
the arrow marked on top of the magazine.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer and the door is closed, the CD changer
stack symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD
changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the CD
changer stack symbol will flash on the display until the
changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing,
the disc and track number will be displayed. The
disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons except for ejecting the magazine.
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Errors” later in this section.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right.
When the door is closed, the changer will begin
checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue
for up to one and a half minutes depending on the
number of discs loaded.
1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses,
elapsed time will be displayed to help you find
the correct passage.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open (to the left). The
magazine will automatically eject. Remember to keep
the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust
from getting inside the changer.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances,
elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the
correct passage.
3-75
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to enter the
random play mode. RAND will appear on the display.
While in this mode, tracks and discs will be played
in random, rather than sequential, order. Press
this pushbutton again to turn off the random feature and
return to normal operation.
6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to select the next disc in
the magazine. Each time you press SIDE, the disc
number on the radio display will go to that of the next
available CD.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. Press this button
again to display the disc and track number. To change
what is normally shown on the display (track or
elapsed time), press this button until you see the display
you want, then hold this button until the display
flashes and a chime is heard. While elapsed time is
showing, CD TIME will appear on the display.
3-76
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow while playing a CD
to go back to the start of the current track if more
than eight seconds have played. If you press it more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the disc.
Press the right arrow and it will go to the next track on
the disc. If you press it more than once, the player
will continue moving forward through the disc.
When you press the left SEEK arrow for two seconds
you will hear a beep. The disc will play the first few
seconds of each track on each disc. DISC SCAN will
appear on the display. Press the left SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to return to listening to the
radio while a CD is playing.
CD or CD TAPE: Press this button to play a CD if you
have a magazine loaded in the changer when listening
to the radio. You can also press this button to switch
between a cassette tape, CD or the CD changer
if all three are loaded.
Compact Disc Errors
Personal Choice Radio Controls
E (Error): If this message and a number appear on the
display, an error has occurred.
If your vehicle has this feature it will enable two drivers
to store and recall personal settings for radio presets,
last tuned station, volume, tone, and audio source
(radio, cassette, or CD).
If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the
compact disc player or changer, the following conditions
may have caused the error:
• E30: You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
• E30: The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or
upside down.
• E30: The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• E34: The CD changer door is open. Completely
close the door to restore normal operation.
• E35: An empty magazine is inserted in the CD
changer. Try the magazine again with a disc loaded
on one of the trays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealership. If your radio displays
an error number other than the error codes listed
previously, write it down and provide it to your dealership
when reporting the problem.
The memory buttons 1 and 2 for this feature are located
on the driver’s door panel and correspond to the
numbers 1 and 2 found on the back of each remote
keyless entry transmitter.
To recall audio sources, press the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter and turn the ignition
on. The source last listened to will be recalled for
the identified driver 1 or 2.
To program this feature, do the following:
1. Set all radio preferences. For more information see
“Setting Preset Stations” and “Setting the Tone”
listed for your particular radio.
2. Locate the memory buttons on the driver’s
door panel.
3. Press one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 until you
hear two beeps. The beeps confirm that your
selection has been saved and can now be recalled.
Follow these steps each time you want to change the
stored settings.
3-77
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed and the
radio is placed in a different vehicle. This feature
requires no user input to be activated. It is automatically
armed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering
wheel.
When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red light
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
If THEFTLOCK® is activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a red
LED indicator light will come on above the key symbol
to indicate a locked condition. If this occurs, the radio will
need to be returned to the dealer.
Q SEEK R: Press the up arrow to seek to the next
station and the down arrow to seek to the previous
station. The sound will mute while seeking. When
playing a cassette tape or a compact disc, press the up
arrow to hear the next selection.
BAND: Press this button to choose FM1, FM2, or AM,
XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped
with XM™ Satellite Radio Service).
3-78
SCAN: Press this button to scan your radio preset
stations. The radio will scan to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. The radio will scan
preset stations with a strong signal only. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
SOURCE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
compact disc when listening to the radio. If a cassette
tape and a compact disc are both loaded, the system will
go to the tape play first.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
Q VOL (Volume) R: Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease volume.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-79
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or they may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If
this message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
3-80
The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette tape as
a damaged tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects,
insert the cassette at least three times to ensure
thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER
indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your CDs
Diversity Antenna System
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Your AM-FM antennas are located in the windshield and
rear window. Be sure that the inside surfaces of the
windshield and rear window are not scratched and that
the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with
radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the
antenna connectors at the top-center of the front
and rear windows need to be properly attached to the
posts on the glass.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
3-81
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true,
the grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
telephone antenna over the grid lines.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (48 Contiguous US States)
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM system may be affected if
your sunroof is open.
3-82
Chime Level Adjustment
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio. To change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the
radio power off. The chime volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will be
displayed on the radio. To change back to the default or
normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The chime level will change from the loud level
to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-25
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-31
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-6.
Drunken Driving
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
4-4
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in
a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the
chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering
and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their
work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-38.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you
are driving, there is a
problem with your traction
control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-39. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out”
under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the“driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
To turn the system off, press the TRACTION OFF
button located at the end of the shift lever on the right
side of the steering wheel.
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button, the warning light will come
on — but the system will not turn off right away. It
will wait until there is no longer a current need to limit
wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control system
warning light should go off.
4-10
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability System Active Message”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-13
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-14
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) do not have enough friction where
the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the traction control system, remember: It
helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have
traction control, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability System Active Message”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-49.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving at Night
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
4-16
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-18
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-58.
4-20
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-21
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
4-22
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
4-26
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow – drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system you’ll want to slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If you don’t have a traction control system, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish
the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have the anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-27
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats – anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow.
4-28
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-30
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-72.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-31
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
4-32
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-22.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dolly Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-33
Tire and Loading Information Label
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
seating capacity and the total weight your vehicle can
properly carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity
weight. If your vehicle has the Tire and Loading
Information label, Example 1, the label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. If your
vehicle has the Tire-Loading Information label,
Example 2, the label is on the rear edge of the
driver’s door.
4-34
The Tire and Loading Information label also gives you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the factory-installed, original equipment tires on your
vehicle. For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-58 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-65.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-39 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4-35
Example 1
Example 2
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
B
C
4-36
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-37
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The Certification label, found on the rear edge of the
driver’s door, tells you the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 176 lbs (80 kg) in your
trunk.
4-38
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It is automatic — you do not need to
adjust anything.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
4-39
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. Also,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
4-40
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. If you have a lot of options,
equipment, passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will
reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry,
which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can
tow. And, it can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-41
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33. Then be sure you do not go over
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-42
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-31. Dirt and water can also enter
the vehicle.
Safety Chains
Trailer Wiring Harness
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer
lighting system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear
lamp connector. This connector is located under the
carpet on the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-43
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a
trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure
they are all working. Once you disconnect the trailer
lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one
of your vehicle lamps is out.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3) and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to
reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-45
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
4-46
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-28
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming ...........................5-49
Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-54
Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps .......................5-55
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-56
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-57
Tires ..............................................................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-65
Check Tire Pressure System ..........................5-66
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-68
Buying New Tires .........................................5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-71
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-71
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-83
Appearance Care ............................................5-83
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-84
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-86
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-87
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-87
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-89
Finish Damage .............................................5-89
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-89
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-89
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-90
5-2
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-91
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-91
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-91
Electrical System ............................................5-91
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-92
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-92
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion ...................5-95
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-99
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-100
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-24.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill your
tank and wait a few seconds after you’ve finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-40.
The GAS CAP LOOSE-CHECK CAP message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) (if
equipped) if the fuel cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located
next to the parking
brake pedal near
the floor.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release. The hood latch is
located under the hood, near the center, and at the
front edge of the grille.
3. Lift up on the latch as you lift up on the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler
caps are on properly. Then just pull the hood down
and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the engine, you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-92.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-28.
E. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-26.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
H. Engine Coolant Air Bleed Valve. See “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System
on page 5-28.
I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-21.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
Engine Oil
If the ENGINE OIL LOW
CHECK LEVEL DIC
message appears on the
instrument cluster, it
means you need to check
your engine oil level
right away. For more
information, see DIC
Warnings and Messages
on page 3-49.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you do not, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-99.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
5-14
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
Without the GM Oil Life System)
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
5-16
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
with the GM Oil Life System)
If equipped, your vehicle has a computer system that
lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check your oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Oil Life System
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being
turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Oil Life System, do the following:
1. Display the OIL LIFE INDEX on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the RESET button on the DIC for
more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
5-17
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
1. Lift the latches on the engine air cleaner/filter
housing cover.
5-18
3. Disconnect the
electrical connector
from the air intake
hose. This will allow
you to lift the rear
portion of the engine
air cleaner/filter
housing.
2. Remove the air intake hose that is snapped over
the throttle body by pulling the hose upward and
away from the throttle body which is located
near the top of the engine.
4. After detaching the hose from the throttle body, pull
back the entire rear portion of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing by pulling upward and
rearward.
5-19
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the rear section of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
7. Reconnect the electrical connector.
8. Reattach the air intake hose by snapping it back
onto the throttle body.
9. Refasten the latches to the engine air cleaner/filter
housing cover.
5-20
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
5-21
Checking the Fluid Level
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
The transaxle fluid dipstick
top is a round, red loop
and is located next to the
brake master cylinder
behind the engine block.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-22
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEXRON®-III labeled automatic
transaxle fluid.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-23.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
5-23
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-24
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery
tank, but be careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-28.
5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a warning light about a hot engine as well
as an engine coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster.
5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
5-27
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on
location.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-28
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark when the engine is cold. The coolant level
should be at the FULL HOT mark under normal
operating conditions. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a
problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at the
FULL COLD mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-30
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-31
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
3. Remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield
to access the bleed valve.
5-32
3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube
and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill
tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise
and remove it.
3.2. If you have the supercharged engine,
remove the nut in the center of the cover
shield.
3.3. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide
the catch tab out of the engine bracket and
remove the cover shield.
3.4. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the
valve cover oil fill hole until you are ready to
replace the cover shield.
4. After the engine cools,
open the coolant air
bleed valve. There
is one bleed valve. It is
located on the
thermostat housing.
5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more information
about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valve after the radiator is filled.
6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. Replace the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.
7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield
under the bracket on the engine.
7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield over the
hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and
cap by twisting clockwise.
7.4. If you have the supercharged engine, install
the nut in the center of the cover shield.
5-33
8. Then fill the coolant
recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
5-34
11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
12. Then replace the
pressure cap. At any
time during this
procedure if coolant
begins to flow out
of the filler neck,
reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure the arrow
on the pressure cap
lines up like this.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located below the
generator and behind the accessory drive belt in the rear
of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
5-35
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-23.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-36
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Your master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up.
5-37
The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes will not work well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-23. Use new brake fluid from a
sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. A chime will sound if you try
to drive with this warning light on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-37.
5-38
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-83.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-22.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco® battery.
5-40
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To
access the battery, see Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion on page 5-95. You do not need to access the
battery to jump start your vehicle. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
{CAUTION:
A battery that is not properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage your
rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be
able to see this damage, and the safety belts
might not provide the protection needed in a
crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed,
it must be vented in the same manner as the
original battery. Always make sure that the
vent hose is properly reattached before
reinstalling the seat cushion.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive you vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-78.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the steps below to do
it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-42
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.
Access the remote
positive (+) terminal by
removing the cover.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet(s). Turn
off the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Open the hood on your vehicle and find the remote
positive (+) terminal, located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote positive (+) terminal
is for that purpose.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-43
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5-45
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move. The
electrical connection is
just as good there,
and the chance
of sparks getting back
to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
5-46
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Headlamp Aiming
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim
has been preset at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the “0”
(zero) marks on their scales.
5-47
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers (for
horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high
beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that
you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
5-48
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low-beam
lamps. The high-beam lamps will be correctly aimed if
the low-beam lamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (left/right)
adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming procedure. If
you believe your headlamps need only vertical
(up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical aiming
procedure.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx® screwdriver.
5-49
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam
lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each lamp; if left low beam, subtract two
inches. Record this distance.
5-50
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5. Turn the vertical aiming
screw (C) until the
headlamp beam
is aimed to the
horizontal tape line.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5-51
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-56.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
1. Remove the two bolts retaining the headlamp
assembly.
2. Slide the headlamp outward until the pins are loose.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly to access the
bulbs.
5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Once the headlamp assembly has been removed from
the vehicle, the front turn signal bulbs can be
accessed.
1. Reach down into the space provided by the
removal of the headlamp assembly and, while
pushing in the tab on the bulb assembly, turn the
assembly counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out of the
retainer.
3. Install the new bulb and turn the bulb assembly
back into place.
4. Turn the bulb retainer counterclockwise to remove it
from the bulb assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the retainer. Push
the new bulb straight into the retainer.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
1. Open the trunk. Turn the screws located just inside
of the trunk counterclockwise and remove them.
6. Turn the bulb socket
one-quarter turn
counterclockwise, while
pressing it firmly.
2. Remove the plastic trim piece from the trunk.
3. Pull the carpet away from the rear area to access
the turn signal bulb assembly.
4. Loosen and remove the bolts that hold the assembly
in place.
7. Pull the bulb socket straight out of the assembly.
8. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out.
9. Replace with a new bulb by pushing the bulb
straight into the socket until the bulb clicks into
place.
10. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn into the
assembly to lock it back into place.
11. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the bulb
assembly.
5. Pull out the bulb assembly.
5-54
Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps
2. Pull out the assembly.
1. Open the trunk. Loosen and remove the seven
fasteners that hold the taillamp assembly in
place. The assembly for both sides is one piece.
The entire piece must be removed to replace
any bulbs.
5-55
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Front
Low Beam Headlamps
High Beam Headlamps
Front Turn Signals
9006
9005
3157
Rear
Trunk Mounted Back-Up Lamps 3057
Trunk Mounted Taillamps
194
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
3357
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
3. Push in the tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to install
the assembly.
5-56
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-17 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Lift the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Push the tab on the wiper blade assembly and pull
the assembly down enough to release it from the
U-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
3. Remove the blade.
4. To reinstall the wiper blade assembly, slide it over
the wiper arm to engage the U-hooked end on the
wiper blade assembly. Pull up on the assembly
to lock it into place.
For the proper windshield wiper blade replacement
length and type, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 5-100.
5-57
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION:
5-58
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
•
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
Passenger Car Tire Example
5-59
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For more information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-65 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-60
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-83 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-73.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-83 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
5-61
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The
load range represents the load carrying capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to
279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire
is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from
“A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
5-62
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles substantially less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
before a tire has built up heat from driving. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
5-63
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-65 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-64
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-68.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-70.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
When to Check
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Check your tires once a month or more.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Needless damage from road hazards
5-65
Check Tire Pressure System
If your vehicle has the check tire pressure system, it
can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one
tire. The system will not alert you before you drive
that a tire is low or flat. You must begin driving before
the system will work properly.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if pressure
difference (low pressure) is detected in one tire. The
check tire pressure system may not alert you if:
• More than one tire is low.
• The vehicle is moving faster than
65 mph (105 km/h).
•
•
•
•
•
The system is not yet calibrated.
The tire treadwear is uneven.
The compact spare tire is installed.
Tire chains are being used.
The vehicle is being driven on a rough or
frozen road.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
the check tire pressure system may not be working
properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.
5-66
The check tire pressure system detects differences in
tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in
tire pressure. The system can alert you about a
low tire — but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tires on page 5-58.
When the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message appears
on the Driver Information Center, you should stop as
soon as you can and check all your tires for damage. If
a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-73.
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as
you can. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one
or more tires repaired or replaced, you will need to reset
(calibrate) the check tire pressure system. You will
also need to reset the system whenever you rotate the
tires, buy new tires and install or remove the compact
spare tire.
Do not reset the check tire pressure system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset
the system when the tire pressures are incorrect,
the check tire pressure system will not work properly
and may not alert you when a tire is low or high.
To reset (calibrate) the system:
1. Turn the ignition switch to RUN.
2. Press the GAGE INFO button on the DIC until TIRE
PRESSURE appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the DIC RESET button for about
five seconds. After five seconds, the display will
show TIRE PRESSURE RESET. If TIRE
PRESSURE RESET does not appear in the display
after about five seconds repeat the procedure. If
it does not work after two tries, see your dealer for
service. After you release the DIC RESET button,
TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL will appear in the
display.
The system completes the calibration process during
driving. Calibration time can take 45 to 90 minutes,
depending on your driving habits. After the system
has been calibrated, the system will alert the driver
that a tire is low, up to a maximum speed of 65 mph
(105 km/h).
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-68 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-71 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-67
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Reset the check tire pressure system, if equipped. See
Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-66.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-99.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-68
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the tire and loading information label. For an example
of this label and its location, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
{CAUTION:
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
load range, traction, ride and other things during normal
service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season
tread design, the TPC number will be followed by
an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-70
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-71
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more
information.
5-72
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-73
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-74
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
4. Unscrew the wing nuts to remove the container that
holds the wrench and jack.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and the spare tire
from the trunk.
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk.
2. Lift and remove the cover.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-83 for more information
about the compact spare.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
5-75
Removing the Wheel Covers and
Wheel Nut Caps
If your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center
hub cap that hides the wheel nuts, remove the hub
cap by using the flat end of the wheel wrench to pry
it off.
If your vehicle has a steel wheel with a wheel cover, the
center hub cap must be removed first by using the
flat end of the wheel wrench to pry it off. Once the center
hub cap has been removed, loosen the plastic nut
caps with the wheel wrench. Once the plastic nut
caps have been loosened, remove the wheel cover
by hand.
When reinstalling the wheel cover, carefully line up the
tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover.
5-76
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack head until it fits under the vehicle.
1. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel
nuts, but do not remove them yet.
2. The jack has a bolt at the end. Attach the wheel
wrench to the bolt to create a jack handle.
5-77
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
4. Put the jack into a notch in the frame which is
located near each wheel well. The front notch is
eight inches (20 cm) back from the front wheel well.
The rear notch is three inches (8 cm) forward
from the rear wheel well. The notches are
accessible through openings in the plastic trim at
the bottom of the vehicle.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly on the ridge in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put
the compact spare tire near you.
5-78
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far
enough so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
5-79
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Make sure each
wheel stud is centered
in each wheel hole
while tightening the
nuts. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise on the jack. Lower the jack
completely.
5-80
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
Use the following procedure to secure the flat tire in
the trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment
in the trunk.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
5-81
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the compact spare tire and tools as shown in the
diagram.
5-82
E. Spare Tire Cover
A. Wrench
F. Washer and
B. Jack
Retainer
C. Jack Container
D. Retainer
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” following for
more information.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must
calibrate the Check Tire Pressure System after installing
or removing the compact spare. See Check Tire
Pressure System on page 5-66. Of course, it’s best to
replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your compact
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
5-83
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Naphtha
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Acetone
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
Benzene
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these unless this manual says
you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-90.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-84
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
Cleaning Vinyl
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
5-85
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
5-86
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-23.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-90.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-87
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-88
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-89
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and protects
in one easy step, no wiping
necessary.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or stainless
steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Medium foaming shampoo.
Cleans and lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and convertible
tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust, fingerprints,
and surface contaminants.
Spray on wipe off.
5-90
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily removes
spots and stains from
carpets, vinyl and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-23.
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
5-91
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the rear fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment
fuse block is located near
the front on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
You will find a fuse puller clipped in both of the fuse
blocks. Snap the wide end of the fuse puller at the side
indentations and pull the fuse out.
The MaxiFuses are located in two fuse blocks, one
located in the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side and the other under the rear seat on the driver’s
side. If a MaxiFuse should blow, have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately.
5-92
Lift the cover to gain access. On some vehicles, there
may be an additional cover that you will need to lift
to gain access to the fuses.
Fuse 22 or 23 can be moved to the outer position to
provide continuous power to the auxiliary outlets
or cigarette lighter when the ignition is not on. See your
dealer for additional assistance, if needed.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Usage
Not Used
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Not Used
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Instrument Panel
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Usage
Powertrain Control Module Battery
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Ignition 1
Not Used
Transaxle
Cruise Control
Direct Ignition System
Injector Bank #2
Not Used
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Oxygen Sensor
Injector Bank #1
Auxiliary Power
Cigarette Lighter
Fog Lamps/Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioner Clutch
5-93
Relays
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Circuit
Breakers
41
5-94
Usage
High-Beam Headlamp
Low-Beam Headlamp
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioner Clutch
HVAC Solenoid
Accessory
Not Used
Starter 1
Cooling Fan 1
Ignition 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
Usage
Starter
Fuses
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Usage
Not Used
Empty
ABS
Not Used
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with
the metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a
short that could damage the battery and or
wires. Avoid contact between the rear seat and the
fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall
the rear seat. Do not remove covers from any of the
covered parts, and do not store anything under
the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the
vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that isn’t properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. If the safety
belt hasn’t been routed through the seat
cushion at all, it won’t be there to work for the
next passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
5-95
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is
located beneath the rear
seat on the driver’s
side. The rear seat cushion
must be removed to
access the fuse block. See
Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion on page 5-95.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Don’t let the safety belts get
twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
5-96
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Usage
Fuel Pump
HVAC Blower
Memory
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
Not Used
Compact Disc (CD)
Driver’s Door Module
Air Bag System (SIR)
Not Used
Right Parking Lamp
Vent Solenoid
Ignition 1
Fuses
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Usage
Left Parking Lamp
Dimmer
Satellite Digital Radio
Left Front Heated Seat
Not Used
Rear Door Module
Stoplamp
Park/Reverse
Audio
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger Door Module
Body
Interior Lamps
Not Used
Ignition Switch
Instrument Panel
Right Front Heated Seat
Not Used
HVAC
Ignition 3 Rear
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Turn Signal/Hazard
HVAC Battery
Dimmer
5-97
Relays
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Circuit
Breakers
56
57
5-98
Usage
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamp
Ignition 1
Rear Fog Lamp
Not Used
Park
Reverse
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Fuel Tank Door Lock
Not Used
Ignition 3
Fuel Tank Door Release
Interior Lamps
Trunk Release
Front Courtesy Lamps
Not Used
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Usage
Power Seats
Power Windows
Relays
58
59
Usage
Cigar
Rear Defogger
Fuses
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
Usage
Not Used
Rear Defog
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Cigar
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-23 for more information.
Capacities
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
2.2 lbs
1.0 kg
Automatic Transaxle
7.4 quarts
7.0 L
Engine Cooling System
10.0 quarts
9.5 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
4.5 quarts
4.3 L
18.5 gallons
70.0 L
100 lb-ft
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.8L V6
K
Automatic
0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
5-99
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
25096932
A1096C
Engine Oil Filter
25010792
PF-47
Fuel Filter
25121293
GF-627
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
25654414
—
Spark Plugs
12568387
41–101
Transaxle Filter
24206433
—
Windshield Wiper Blades
12463075
—
Part
Type
Length
5-100
Shepherd’s Hook
22 inches (56.0 cm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-13
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-17
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-17
At Least Once a Month .................................6-17
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-18
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-18
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-21
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-21
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-21
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-22
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-22
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-22
Brake System Inspection ................................6-22
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-23
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-24
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your GM dealer’s service department do
these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported
service people that will perform the work using genuine
GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive short distances only a
few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part
D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions).
Every 150 000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down
slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Tire Rotation.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions.)
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-17
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-21.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection.
6-6
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
* If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System, a computer
system lets you know when to change the oil and
filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13 for information on resetting the system.
Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire Pressure
System (if equipped) must be reset.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-22.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
6-7
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-8
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-9
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-10
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
6-11
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both
the fluid and filter.
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first.) An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote *.)
6-12
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-17
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-21.
Footnotes
Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil
change will be indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. It is also important
to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper
level.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13 for information on resetting the system.
* If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System, a computer
system lets you know when to change the engine oil
and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and
engine temperature, and not on mileage.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-22.
Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire Pressure
System (if equipped) must be reset.
6-13
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-14
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-15
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both
the fluid and filter
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote *.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-67 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)
6-16
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-58 for further
details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-55 for further details.
6-17
At Least Twice a Year
Automatic Transaxle Check
Restraint System Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if
needed.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
“Windshield Wiper and Wiper Blades” under Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-87.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-23.
6-18
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, glove box
door and console door. Part D tells you what to
use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-19
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-20
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-31.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
6-21
Fuel System Inspection
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-22
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only
Engine Coolant DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Parking Brake U.S. 12377985, in Canada
or lubricant meeting
Cable Guides 88901242)
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-IIII Automatic
Transaxle
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Secondary
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
Latch, Pivots, 992723) or lubricant meeting
Spring Anchor requirements of NLGI #2, Category
and Release LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Fuel Door,
Glove Box
Lubricant, Superlube
Door, Console Multi-Purpose
Door and Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Compartment Canada 10953474).
Lid Hinges
Silicone Grease (GM Part
Weatherstrip Dielectric
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
Conditioning
992887).
6-23
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-24
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-25
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-26
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Records .....................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Buick, the letter should be addressed to Buick’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium
Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered
under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new car
warranty (whichever occurs first).
Our commitment to Buick owners has always included
superior service through our network of Buick dealers.
Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an
extra measure of convenience and security.
Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed
by a team of technically trained advisors, who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Buick
dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
•
•
•
•
•
7-6
Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
Change a flat tire
Jump starts
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the
following additional services depending on your needs:
• Hotels
• Glass replacement
• Tire repair facilities
• Rental vehicle or taxis
• Airports or train stations
• Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Buick’s comprehensive warranty. However, when
other services are utilized, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following information to give the advisor:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
Buick reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call
away. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
Courtesy Transportation
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to
10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such a s taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
event by computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about the condition
of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as engine
speed, brake applications, throttle position, vehicle
speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-22
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-36
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-91
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-57, 3-65
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-36
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-47
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-53
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-56
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-53
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-54
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-51
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-50
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
AM ............................................................... 3-79
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ................... 3-81
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System .......................................... 3-82
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-38
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-83
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-86
Appearance Care (cont.)
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
Diversity Antenna System .............................
Personal Choice Radio Controls ....................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with CD ............................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Door Locks .....................................
Automatic Level Control ...................................
Automatic Operation ........................................
5-89
5-84
5-87
5-89
5-89
5-89
5-90
5-87
3-23
3-55
3-78
3-80
3-81
3-81
3-82
3-81
3-77
3-62
3-56
3-55
3-78
3-73
3-79
3-82
3-51
4-39
3-27
1
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transaxle Check ..............................
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
5-21
2-25
6-18
6-19
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-44
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Battery Load Management ............................... 3-20
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-8
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-37
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-18
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Inspection ....................................... 6-22
System Warning Light .................................. 3-37
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-37
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-39
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps .......................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-47
5-52
5-56
5-55
5-54
5-69
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-99
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-25, 4-39, 2-14, 2-31
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-86
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-80
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-81
Your CDs ................................................... 3-81
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-71
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-17
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-71
CD Changer, Trunk-Mounted ............................ 3-73
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-42
Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts .... 1-19
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-72
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Tire Pressure System ...................................
Checking Coolant ............................................
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
3-40
5-66
5-25
5-13
5-10
1-56
5-89
1-33
1-29
1-39
1-27
1-41
1-42
1-44
1-37
1-38
1-36
3-82
3-23
5-84
5-87
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-87
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 5-88
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-87
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-84
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-86
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-86
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-86
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-86
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-89
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-85
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-88
Climate Control System ................................... 3-24
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-31
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-26
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30
Steering Wheel Controls ............................... 3-31
Compact Disc Errors ....................................... 3-77
Compact Disc Messages .......................... 3-62, 3-73
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-83
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-34
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-34
Compass Variance .......................................... 2-34
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-18
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-42
3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Cornering Lamps ............................................ 3-15
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-18
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-44
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
4
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-25, 3-29
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-18
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-18
Delayed Locking ..................................... 2-11, 3-53
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-32
Diversity Antenna System ................................. 3-81
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-33
Door
Central Door Unlocking System ..................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door Ajar Reminder ..................................... 2-11
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-13
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12
Driver ID ....................................................... 3-54
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-46
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-50
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-16
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
Driving (cont.)
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...........................
Winter ........................................................
Driving On Grades ..........................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
Dual Automatic Climate Control System .............
4-17
4-25
4-45
4-26
4-19
4-20
4-43
3-26
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion ..................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
5-91
5-92
5-92
5-95
2-15
Engine (cont.)
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-31
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Starting ...................................................... 2-23
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-92
Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-17
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-46
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16
Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-17
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-41
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-17
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-17
Exterior Lights ................................................ 3-53
3-42
F
5-18
5-40
3-40
5-23
2-24
3-40
6-22
5-12
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finding a PTY Station ..................................... 3-59
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) ............. 3-66
Finding a Station .................................... 3-56, 3-64
Finish Care .................................................... 5-87
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-89
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 3-9
5
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-79
Following Distance .......................................... 4-44
Footnotes ................................................ 6-7, 6-13
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-45
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
System Inspection ....................................... 6-22
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-92
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40
Fuel .......................................................... 3-45
Speedometer .............................................. 3-35
6
Gage (cont.)
Tachometer ................................................. 3-35
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-38
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-41
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-47
Horizontal Aiming ......................................... 5-49
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 5-50
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8
Headlamps .................................................... 5-52
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps On Reminder ................................. 3-14
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-20
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hitches .......................................................... 4-42
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-38
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-39
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-7
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-30
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-31
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-23
How to Check ........................................ 5-21, 5-65
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-36
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-18
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-19
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
Ignition Positions .............................................
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ..........................
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-19
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-65
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-22
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-22
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-21
Fuel System ............................................... 6-22
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-21
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-21
Throttle System ........................................... 6-22
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-33
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-17
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17
J
5-27
5-26
3-41
3-42
4-30
4-40
4-28
2-22
6-20
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-18
Key Reminder Warning .................................... 2-23
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
7
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Language Selection .........................................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-12,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running ..........................................
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Battery Warning ..........................................
Brake System Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
Security .....................................................
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror ...............................
Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
8
3-14
3-17
3-54
1-19
1-21
1-39
1-41
2-13
2-29
3-36
3-38
3-37
3-37
3-44
3-40
3-43
3-36
3-44
3-44
3-39
3-39
2-17
4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ..................... 2-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-13
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-13
Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-13
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill .........................................
At Least Once a Month ................................
At Least Once a Year ..................................
At Least Twice a Year ..................................
Brake System Inspection ..............................
Engine Cooling System Inspection .................
Exhaust System Inspection ...........................
Fuel System Inspection ................................
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-22
6-22
6-21
6-22
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-17
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ....... 6-21
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-23
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-24
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-21
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-22
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-46
Making Turns ................................................. 4-44
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-40
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Operation ........................................... 3-27
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-8
Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-44
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-44
Memory Seats ................................................ 3-54
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Mirror Operation ..................................... 2-33, 2-34
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass .... 2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-33
Memory ..................................................... 2-44
Outside Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ...... 2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-36
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-35
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-100
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-35
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
9
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-43
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-38
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-37
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-37
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-38
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30
Outside
Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror .................. 2-36
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-36
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-35
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ........................ 3-54
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
P
Park(P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30
10
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-20
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-45
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-17
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-21
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .................................................. 6-23
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-24
Passenger Temperature Control ........................ 3-30
Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-44
PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-20
Perimeter Lighting ................................... 3-18, 3-53
Personal Choice Programming .......................... 2-11
Personal Choice Radio Controls ........................ 3-77
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-31
Personalization Features .................................... 2-6
Personalization Programming ............................ 2-12
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-70
Playing a Compact Disc .................. 3-60, 3-71, 3-75
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-56, 3-63
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-22
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-92
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-17
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-39
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ....................................
Radio Data System (RDS) ...............................
Radio Messages ..................................... 3-60,
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Personal Choice Radio Controls ....................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with CD ............................................
5-26
3-62
3-67
3-55
3-80
3-81
3-81
3-77
3-62
3-56
Radios (cont.)
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-55
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-78
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer .......................... 3-73
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-79
Rainsense™ II Wipers ....................................... 3-9
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-59, 3-66
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-24
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-21
Rear Underseat Fuse Block .............................. 5-96
Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-26, 3-29
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-33
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass .................................................... 2-33
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-33
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Remote Trunk Release Lockout ........................ 2-14
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-75
Removing the Wheel Covers and Wheel
Nut Caps ................................................... 5-76
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-56
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-40
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-57
11
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-41
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-42
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-18
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-57
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-56
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-57
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-23
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-19
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-32
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Front Passenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
12
3-36
5-86
1-19
1-12
Safety Belts (cont.)
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-21
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-19
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-18
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-43
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-44
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-41
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44
Security Feedback .................................... 2-7, 3-52
Security Light ................................................. 3-44
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Sensors ................................................. 3-25, 3-29
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-40
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-44
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12
Service Engine Soon Light ............................... 3-40
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-57, 3-64
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-55
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-57, 3-65
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-89
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Skidding ........................................................ 4-15
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-85
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-99
Speedometer .................................................. 3-35
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-19
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-23
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-12
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-21
Steering Tips ..................................................
Steering Wheel Comfort Controls ......................
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .........................
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................
Convenience Net .........................................
Glove Box ..................................................
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools ..........................
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools .......................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
4-10
3-31
3-78
2-42
2-42
2-42
5-81
5-82
4-30
2-17
2-43
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-35
Taillamps
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-55
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-54
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-39
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-19
Theater Dimming ............................................ 3-18
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-78
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-20
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-22
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
13
Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-17
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-58
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-62
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-62
Tires ............................................................. 5-58
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-69
Chains ....................................................... 5-72
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74
Check Tire Pressure System ......................... 5-66
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-83
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-65
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-67
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-71
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-71
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-68
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-24
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-38
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-30
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-42
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-39
14
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-43
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-43
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-25
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-35
Trunk ............................................................ 2-14
Trunk Lock Release ........................................ 2-14
Trunk Security Override ................................... 2-15
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ............................. 3-73
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-44
Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-16
U
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-20
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-79
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-70
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-72
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-85
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-41
Using RDS .................................................... 3-58
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-44
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Records .. 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-91
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-91
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-50
Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................. 2-44
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-41
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-32
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-49
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-87
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-18
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-41
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-41
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
What to Use .......................................... 5-24, 5-36
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-71
Replacement ............................................... 5-71
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles with
the GM Oil Life System) ............................... 5-17
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
Without the GM Oil Life System) ................... 5-16
When to Check .............................................. 5-65
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-21
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-36
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-18
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-46
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-8
Window Lock Out ................................... 2-17, 3-52
Windows ....................................................... 2-16
Power ........................................................ 2-17
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-36
15
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-17
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-57
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-14
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-18
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-82
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States) ........................... 3-79
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(USA Only) ................................................. 3-63
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
16
">